be passionate about business date 2012 wtribal oman · tribal be passionate about business and life...
TRANSCRIPT
TribalBe Passionate About Business and Life
The Tribal Wom
an Magazine Septem
ber 2012 Live the Life of Your Dreams wwwtheTribalW
omancom
Why Las Vegas is Where You Need To Be
AUTHOR 101
Project LIGHT RwandaHow Individual Healing Can Lead To World Transformation
SHIFT YOUR ENERGY From Negative to Positive in 3 Easy Steps
Michelle Bersell
The Feminine Path for Entrepreneurs
Woman Date 2012
Woman MagazineThe Tribal
4 Winds of Change PublishingMadison Connecticut
2012 4 Winds of Change Inc All Rights Reserved
EditorCheryl T Campbell wwwthetribalwomancom
ContributorsMichelle Bersell wwwMichelleBersellcom
Paloma Baertschi-Herrera wwwSpeciesSpacecom Candess Campbell wwwCandessCampbellcom
Marian Edvardsen wwwMarianEdvardsencom
Heather Laughter wwwHeatherLaughtercom
Michelle Manning-Kogler wwwquatumsoulclearingcom
Sally Palmer wwwSabreBusinessWorldcom
Elizebeth Pfeiffer wwwAngelicSoulutionscom
Holli Rovenger wwwHolliRovengercom
How to Reach the Tribal WomanLetters to the Editor lettersthetribalwomancomVisit httpthetribalwomancom or httpcheryltcampbellcomEmail support4windsofchangecomContribute Content contentthetribalwomancom
How to Reach the Tribal WomanLetters to the Editor lettersthetribalwomancomVisit httpthetribalwomancom or httpcheryltcampbellcomEmail support4windsofchangecomContribute Content contentthetribalwomancom
Tribal Woman In This Issue
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketerrsquos Corner
Social Media Todayand why I love it
Harness the Powerlearn the basics today
Build A Better Business BlogPart Two of a Two Part Training Series
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketerrsquos Corner
Social Media is everywhere Facebook Flickr Digg Twitter LinkedIn Pinterest YouTube Google +
Social Media Today The list goes on Why is social media so important today If you read last monthrsquos article you know that itrsquos because we all have an innate desire to belong to community
Social Media is here to stay and if you are a business owner it needs to be included in your marketing plan
Some of the potential benefits of social media
build brand awareness and loyaltystrengthen relationships with your audience clients potential customers influential people in your field etcimprove customer service and customer interactiondrive more traffic to your website(s)improve your search engine rankings yes Google favors social mediagenerate sales
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Meet Author
Name
the Marketing Corner
Meet CherylI love to learn and I love to teach what I have been taught I graduated with a BS degree in Marketing in 1982 and have been a lover of life for as long as I can remember
My career has been a diverse and satisfying journey taking me from the hazardous waste field to SCUBA diving Instructor and ultimately to small business owner While developing a successful Interior Decorating and Custom Upholstery Shop I became fascinated with internet marketing and have never looked back
I am the best selling author of several books including Relationship Marketing amp The New Entrepreneur and The New Masters of Online Marketing I speak internationally about marketing and most importantly I am passionate about helping women entrepreneurs create and grow heart centered businesses where mind body and spirit come together so we can live a life fulfilled a life lived to our highest potential
httptheTribalWomancom
Social media is part of the new world of marketing You need it in your business regardless of your business Thatrsquos why in this issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner I decided to concentrate on LinkedIn
On a personal note I love social media because it has inspired me in so many ways Itrsquos because of the relationships that I made through social media that this magazine was created itrsquos why I wrote my book on Relationship Marketing and the New Entrepreneur and it is how I developed so many incredible friendships that have enriched my life
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Harness The PowerWhen it comes to building your presence online there are plenty of reasons why you should create a profile for your business on LinkedIn
First of all LinkedIn is a business-focused social networking site Majority of its members are online entrepreneurs business owners marketers and all sorts of business-oriented individuals This fact alone makes the social site a must-have for your own business If you are not building your presence on it then you are missing out on a lot of business opportunities
Whether you are promoting a new product or service looking to hire new employees or simply marketing your business as a whole LinkedIn provides you with a plethora of tools and resources that you may use to help you accomplish all these things
Creating a LinkedIn profile for your business is an effective business strategy Here are a few tips on how you should go about it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
1 Setting up a business profile on LinkedIn is free so there are no related costs that you have to be worried about Just log in to the site using your personal account find the ldquoCompaniesrdquo menu and just follow the instructions from thereon LinkedIns wizard will guide you throughout the whole process
2 Make sure that you complete all the necessary information in the registration process Dont leave any space blank If you have a logo for your business then add it Dont forget to place the location of your business as well This is especially important if your business is a brick and mortar one Including your business location is very critical if your online presence is for marketing purposes only You have to let people know where they can find your physical store if they are interested in doing business with you
3 Take time to write a brief but very informative description of your business See to it that the description includes information about your business offerings whether these are products or services or both Most people dont have the time to read through long texts so make the description as brief and as straight to the point as possible
4 Place your business under the correct category LinkedIn members will be using the sites search functions to look for businesses on the site If you placed your business in the wrong category or industry your targeted customers or partners wont be able to find your business profile
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
The Tribal Woman Magazine
5 If you have a business or company blog get the feed of the blog and include it on your business LinkedIn profile Anyone who follows your profile will be updated on the latest posts on your blog If you dont have a business blog now is the time to start one Putting the feed on your LinkedIn profile will keep the page fresh and entice other LinkedIn members to keep visiting your business profile
6 LinkedIn will pull all the other accounts feeds and links on the site related to your business profile and connect them all together These include your job listings current employees and even former employees With that said its crucial that you monitor these things to make sure that everything that is being connected to your profile are legit
When it comes to setting up a LinkedIn profile for your business keep these simple tips in mind and you will have a winning profile in no time
In your October issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner we will be talking about how to use LinkedIn Answers for building your business credibility
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
part two of a two part
seriesBuild A Better Business Blog
I am often quoted as saying ldquoYour clients buys you before they buy what you are sellingrdquo Believe me itrsquos true Blogs are on of the ways you can start a conversation with your audience They are a powerful tool for connecting you with them on an ongoing basis so you can build and maintain a relationship
The problem for most business owners is that they do not have a customizable website and adding a blog would be more time effort and energy than they could ever afford to invest until now
In this training series ANYONE can learn the basics of blogging and Wordpress technology and translate that knowledge very quickly into a marketable revenue generating skill
You will go from absolutely ZERO knowledge about blogging to a confident and capable business blogger using the powerful Wordpress platform If you can dedicate a few short hours to you will be miles ahead of the competition and ready to separate yourself from the pack
The series gives you 10 very specific lessons that will help your business get up and running in the blogging world in less than a day
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Woman MagazineThe Tribal
4 Winds of Change PublishingMadison Connecticut
2012 4 Winds of Change Inc All Rights Reserved
EditorCheryl T Campbell wwwthetribalwomancom
ContributorsMichelle Bersell wwwMichelleBersellcom
Paloma Baertschi-Herrera wwwSpeciesSpacecom Candess Campbell wwwCandessCampbellcom
Marian Edvardsen wwwMarianEdvardsencom
Heather Laughter wwwHeatherLaughtercom
Michelle Manning-Kogler wwwquatumsoulclearingcom
Sally Palmer wwwSabreBusinessWorldcom
Elizebeth Pfeiffer wwwAngelicSoulutionscom
Holli Rovenger wwwHolliRovengercom
How to Reach the Tribal WomanLetters to the Editor lettersthetribalwomancomVisit httpthetribalwomancom or httpcheryltcampbellcomEmail support4windsofchangecomContribute Content contentthetribalwomancom
How to Reach the Tribal WomanLetters to the Editor lettersthetribalwomancomVisit httpthetribalwomancom or httpcheryltcampbellcomEmail support4windsofchangecomContribute Content contentthetribalwomancom
Tribal Woman In This Issue
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketerrsquos Corner
Social Media Todayand why I love it
Harness the Powerlearn the basics today
Build A Better Business BlogPart Two of a Two Part Training Series
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketerrsquos Corner
Social Media is everywhere Facebook Flickr Digg Twitter LinkedIn Pinterest YouTube Google +
Social Media Today The list goes on Why is social media so important today If you read last monthrsquos article you know that itrsquos because we all have an innate desire to belong to community
Social Media is here to stay and if you are a business owner it needs to be included in your marketing plan
Some of the potential benefits of social media
build brand awareness and loyaltystrengthen relationships with your audience clients potential customers influential people in your field etcimprove customer service and customer interactiondrive more traffic to your website(s)improve your search engine rankings yes Google favors social mediagenerate sales
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Meet Author
Name
the Marketing Corner
Meet CherylI love to learn and I love to teach what I have been taught I graduated with a BS degree in Marketing in 1982 and have been a lover of life for as long as I can remember
My career has been a diverse and satisfying journey taking me from the hazardous waste field to SCUBA diving Instructor and ultimately to small business owner While developing a successful Interior Decorating and Custom Upholstery Shop I became fascinated with internet marketing and have never looked back
I am the best selling author of several books including Relationship Marketing amp The New Entrepreneur and The New Masters of Online Marketing I speak internationally about marketing and most importantly I am passionate about helping women entrepreneurs create and grow heart centered businesses where mind body and spirit come together so we can live a life fulfilled a life lived to our highest potential
httptheTribalWomancom
Social media is part of the new world of marketing You need it in your business regardless of your business Thatrsquos why in this issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner I decided to concentrate on LinkedIn
On a personal note I love social media because it has inspired me in so many ways Itrsquos because of the relationships that I made through social media that this magazine was created itrsquos why I wrote my book on Relationship Marketing and the New Entrepreneur and it is how I developed so many incredible friendships that have enriched my life
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Harness The PowerWhen it comes to building your presence online there are plenty of reasons why you should create a profile for your business on LinkedIn
First of all LinkedIn is a business-focused social networking site Majority of its members are online entrepreneurs business owners marketers and all sorts of business-oriented individuals This fact alone makes the social site a must-have for your own business If you are not building your presence on it then you are missing out on a lot of business opportunities
Whether you are promoting a new product or service looking to hire new employees or simply marketing your business as a whole LinkedIn provides you with a plethora of tools and resources that you may use to help you accomplish all these things
Creating a LinkedIn profile for your business is an effective business strategy Here are a few tips on how you should go about it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
1 Setting up a business profile on LinkedIn is free so there are no related costs that you have to be worried about Just log in to the site using your personal account find the ldquoCompaniesrdquo menu and just follow the instructions from thereon LinkedIns wizard will guide you throughout the whole process
2 Make sure that you complete all the necessary information in the registration process Dont leave any space blank If you have a logo for your business then add it Dont forget to place the location of your business as well This is especially important if your business is a brick and mortar one Including your business location is very critical if your online presence is for marketing purposes only You have to let people know where they can find your physical store if they are interested in doing business with you
3 Take time to write a brief but very informative description of your business See to it that the description includes information about your business offerings whether these are products or services or both Most people dont have the time to read through long texts so make the description as brief and as straight to the point as possible
4 Place your business under the correct category LinkedIn members will be using the sites search functions to look for businesses on the site If you placed your business in the wrong category or industry your targeted customers or partners wont be able to find your business profile
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
The Tribal Woman Magazine
5 If you have a business or company blog get the feed of the blog and include it on your business LinkedIn profile Anyone who follows your profile will be updated on the latest posts on your blog If you dont have a business blog now is the time to start one Putting the feed on your LinkedIn profile will keep the page fresh and entice other LinkedIn members to keep visiting your business profile
6 LinkedIn will pull all the other accounts feeds and links on the site related to your business profile and connect them all together These include your job listings current employees and even former employees With that said its crucial that you monitor these things to make sure that everything that is being connected to your profile are legit
When it comes to setting up a LinkedIn profile for your business keep these simple tips in mind and you will have a winning profile in no time
In your October issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner we will be talking about how to use LinkedIn Answers for building your business credibility
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
part two of a two part
seriesBuild A Better Business Blog
I am often quoted as saying ldquoYour clients buys you before they buy what you are sellingrdquo Believe me itrsquos true Blogs are on of the ways you can start a conversation with your audience They are a powerful tool for connecting you with them on an ongoing basis so you can build and maintain a relationship
The problem for most business owners is that they do not have a customizable website and adding a blog would be more time effort and energy than they could ever afford to invest until now
In this training series ANYONE can learn the basics of blogging and Wordpress technology and translate that knowledge very quickly into a marketable revenue generating skill
You will go from absolutely ZERO knowledge about blogging to a confident and capable business blogger using the powerful Wordpress platform If you can dedicate a few short hours to you will be miles ahead of the competition and ready to separate yourself from the pack
The series gives you 10 very specific lessons that will help your business get up and running in the blogging world in less than a day
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Tribal Woman In This Issue
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketerrsquos Corner
Social Media Todayand why I love it
Harness the Powerlearn the basics today
Build A Better Business BlogPart Two of a Two Part Training Series
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketerrsquos Corner
Social Media is everywhere Facebook Flickr Digg Twitter LinkedIn Pinterest YouTube Google +
Social Media Today The list goes on Why is social media so important today If you read last monthrsquos article you know that itrsquos because we all have an innate desire to belong to community
Social Media is here to stay and if you are a business owner it needs to be included in your marketing plan
Some of the potential benefits of social media
build brand awareness and loyaltystrengthen relationships with your audience clients potential customers influential people in your field etcimprove customer service and customer interactiondrive more traffic to your website(s)improve your search engine rankings yes Google favors social mediagenerate sales
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Meet Author
Name
the Marketing Corner
Meet CherylI love to learn and I love to teach what I have been taught I graduated with a BS degree in Marketing in 1982 and have been a lover of life for as long as I can remember
My career has been a diverse and satisfying journey taking me from the hazardous waste field to SCUBA diving Instructor and ultimately to small business owner While developing a successful Interior Decorating and Custom Upholstery Shop I became fascinated with internet marketing and have never looked back
I am the best selling author of several books including Relationship Marketing amp The New Entrepreneur and The New Masters of Online Marketing I speak internationally about marketing and most importantly I am passionate about helping women entrepreneurs create and grow heart centered businesses where mind body and spirit come together so we can live a life fulfilled a life lived to our highest potential
httptheTribalWomancom
Social media is part of the new world of marketing You need it in your business regardless of your business Thatrsquos why in this issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner I decided to concentrate on LinkedIn
On a personal note I love social media because it has inspired me in so many ways Itrsquos because of the relationships that I made through social media that this magazine was created itrsquos why I wrote my book on Relationship Marketing and the New Entrepreneur and it is how I developed so many incredible friendships that have enriched my life
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Harness The PowerWhen it comes to building your presence online there are plenty of reasons why you should create a profile for your business on LinkedIn
First of all LinkedIn is a business-focused social networking site Majority of its members are online entrepreneurs business owners marketers and all sorts of business-oriented individuals This fact alone makes the social site a must-have for your own business If you are not building your presence on it then you are missing out on a lot of business opportunities
Whether you are promoting a new product or service looking to hire new employees or simply marketing your business as a whole LinkedIn provides you with a plethora of tools and resources that you may use to help you accomplish all these things
Creating a LinkedIn profile for your business is an effective business strategy Here are a few tips on how you should go about it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
1 Setting up a business profile on LinkedIn is free so there are no related costs that you have to be worried about Just log in to the site using your personal account find the ldquoCompaniesrdquo menu and just follow the instructions from thereon LinkedIns wizard will guide you throughout the whole process
2 Make sure that you complete all the necessary information in the registration process Dont leave any space blank If you have a logo for your business then add it Dont forget to place the location of your business as well This is especially important if your business is a brick and mortar one Including your business location is very critical if your online presence is for marketing purposes only You have to let people know where they can find your physical store if they are interested in doing business with you
3 Take time to write a brief but very informative description of your business See to it that the description includes information about your business offerings whether these are products or services or both Most people dont have the time to read through long texts so make the description as brief and as straight to the point as possible
4 Place your business under the correct category LinkedIn members will be using the sites search functions to look for businesses on the site If you placed your business in the wrong category or industry your targeted customers or partners wont be able to find your business profile
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
The Tribal Woman Magazine
5 If you have a business or company blog get the feed of the blog and include it on your business LinkedIn profile Anyone who follows your profile will be updated on the latest posts on your blog If you dont have a business blog now is the time to start one Putting the feed on your LinkedIn profile will keep the page fresh and entice other LinkedIn members to keep visiting your business profile
6 LinkedIn will pull all the other accounts feeds and links on the site related to your business profile and connect them all together These include your job listings current employees and even former employees With that said its crucial that you monitor these things to make sure that everything that is being connected to your profile are legit
When it comes to setting up a LinkedIn profile for your business keep these simple tips in mind and you will have a winning profile in no time
In your October issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner we will be talking about how to use LinkedIn Answers for building your business credibility
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
part two of a two part
seriesBuild A Better Business Blog
I am often quoted as saying ldquoYour clients buys you before they buy what you are sellingrdquo Believe me itrsquos true Blogs are on of the ways you can start a conversation with your audience They are a powerful tool for connecting you with them on an ongoing basis so you can build and maintain a relationship
The problem for most business owners is that they do not have a customizable website and adding a blog would be more time effort and energy than they could ever afford to invest until now
In this training series ANYONE can learn the basics of blogging and Wordpress technology and translate that knowledge very quickly into a marketable revenue generating skill
You will go from absolutely ZERO knowledge about blogging to a confident and capable business blogger using the powerful Wordpress platform If you can dedicate a few short hours to you will be miles ahead of the competition and ready to separate yourself from the pack
The series gives you 10 very specific lessons that will help your business get up and running in the blogging world in less than a day
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketerrsquos Corner
Social Media is everywhere Facebook Flickr Digg Twitter LinkedIn Pinterest YouTube Google +
Social Media Today The list goes on Why is social media so important today If you read last monthrsquos article you know that itrsquos because we all have an innate desire to belong to community
Social Media is here to stay and if you are a business owner it needs to be included in your marketing plan
Some of the potential benefits of social media
build brand awareness and loyaltystrengthen relationships with your audience clients potential customers influential people in your field etcimprove customer service and customer interactiondrive more traffic to your website(s)improve your search engine rankings yes Google favors social mediagenerate sales
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Meet Author
Name
the Marketing Corner
Meet CherylI love to learn and I love to teach what I have been taught I graduated with a BS degree in Marketing in 1982 and have been a lover of life for as long as I can remember
My career has been a diverse and satisfying journey taking me from the hazardous waste field to SCUBA diving Instructor and ultimately to small business owner While developing a successful Interior Decorating and Custom Upholstery Shop I became fascinated with internet marketing and have never looked back
I am the best selling author of several books including Relationship Marketing amp The New Entrepreneur and The New Masters of Online Marketing I speak internationally about marketing and most importantly I am passionate about helping women entrepreneurs create and grow heart centered businesses where mind body and spirit come together so we can live a life fulfilled a life lived to our highest potential
httptheTribalWomancom
Social media is part of the new world of marketing You need it in your business regardless of your business Thatrsquos why in this issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner I decided to concentrate on LinkedIn
On a personal note I love social media because it has inspired me in so many ways Itrsquos because of the relationships that I made through social media that this magazine was created itrsquos why I wrote my book on Relationship Marketing and the New Entrepreneur and it is how I developed so many incredible friendships that have enriched my life
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Harness The PowerWhen it comes to building your presence online there are plenty of reasons why you should create a profile for your business on LinkedIn
First of all LinkedIn is a business-focused social networking site Majority of its members are online entrepreneurs business owners marketers and all sorts of business-oriented individuals This fact alone makes the social site a must-have for your own business If you are not building your presence on it then you are missing out on a lot of business opportunities
Whether you are promoting a new product or service looking to hire new employees or simply marketing your business as a whole LinkedIn provides you with a plethora of tools and resources that you may use to help you accomplish all these things
Creating a LinkedIn profile for your business is an effective business strategy Here are a few tips on how you should go about it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
1 Setting up a business profile on LinkedIn is free so there are no related costs that you have to be worried about Just log in to the site using your personal account find the ldquoCompaniesrdquo menu and just follow the instructions from thereon LinkedIns wizard will guide you throughout the whole process
2 Make sure that you complete all the necessary information in the registration process Dont leave any space blank If you have a logo for your business then add it Dont forget to place the location of your business as well This is especially important if your business is a brick and mortar one Including your business location is very critical if your online presence is for marketing purposes only You have to let people know where they can find your physical store if they are interested in doing business with you
3 Take time to write a brief but very informative description of your business See to it that the description includes information about your business offerings whether these are products or services or both Most people dont have the time to read through long texts so make the description as brief and as straight to the point as possible
4 Place your business under the correct category LinkedIn members will be using the sites search functions to look for businesses on the site If you placed your business in the wrong category or industry your targeted customers or partners wont be able to find your business profile
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
The Tribal Woman Magazine
5 If you have a business or company blog get the feed of the blog and include it on your business LinkedIn profile Anyone who follows your profile will be updated on the latest posts on your blog If you dont have a business blog now is the time to start one Putting the feed on your LinkedIn profile will keep the page fresh and entice other LinkedIn members to keep visiting your business profile
6 LinkedIn will pull all the other accounts feeds and links on the site related to your business profile and connect them all together These include your job listings current employees and even former employees With that said its crucial that you monitor these things to make sure that everything that is being connected to your profile are legit
When it comes to setting up a LinkedIn profile for your business keep these simple tips in mind and you will have a winning profile in no time
In your October issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner we will be talking about how to use LinkedIn Answers for building your business credibility
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
part two of a two part
seriesBuild A Better Business Blog
I am often quoted as saying ldquoYour clients buys you before they buy what you are sellingrdquo Believe me itrsquos true Blogs are on of the ways you can start a conversation with your audience They are a powerful tool for connecting you with them on an ongoing basis so you can build and maintain a relationship
The problem for most business owners is that they do not have a customizable website and adding a blog would be more time effort and energy than they could ever afford to invest until now
In this training series ANYONE can learn the basics of blogging and Wordpress technology and translate that knowledge very quickly into a marketable revenue generating skill
You will go from absolutely ZERO knowledge about blogging to a confident and capable business blogger using the powerful Wordpress platform If you can dedicate a few short hours to you will be miles ahead of the competition and ready to separate yourself from the pack
The series gives you 10 very specific lessons that will help your business get up and running in the blogging world in less than a day
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Meet Author
Name
the Marketing Corner
Meet CherylI love to learn and I love to teach what I have been taught I graduated with a BS degree in Marketing in 1982 and have been a lover of life for as long as I can remember
My career has been a diverse and satisfying journey taking me from the hazardous waste field to SCUBA diving Instructor and ultimately to small business owner While developing a successful Interior Decorating and Custom Upholstery Shop I became fascinated with internet marketing and have never looked back
I am the best selling author of several books including Relationship Marketing amp The New Entrepreneur and The New Masters of Online Marketing I speak internationally about marketing and most importantly I am passionate about helping women entrepreneurs create and grow heart centered businesses where mind body and spirit come together so we can live a life fulfilled a life lived to our highest potential
httptheTribalWomancom
Social media is part of the new world of marketing You need it in your business regardless of your business Thatrsquos why in this issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner I decided to concentrate on LinkedIn
On a personal note I love social media because it has inspired me in so many ways Itrsquos because of the relationships that I made through social media that this magazine was created itrsquos why I wrote my book on Relationship Marketing and the New Entrepreneur and it is how I developed so many incredible friendships that have enriched my life
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Harness The PowerWhen it comes to building your presence online there are plenty of reasons why you should create a profile for your business on LinkedIn
First of all LinkedIn is a business-focused social networking site Majority of its members are online entrepreneurs business owners marketers and all sorts of business-oriented individuals This fact alone makes the social site a must-have for your own business If you are not building your presence on it then you are missing out on a lot of business opportunities
Whether you are promoting a new product or service looking to hire new employees or simply marketing your business as a whole LinkedIn provides you with a plethora of tools and resources that you may use to help you accomplish all these things
Creating a LinkedIn profile for your business is an effective business strategy Here are a few tips on how you should go about it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
1 Setting up a business profile on LinkedIn is free so there are no related costs that you have to be worried about Just log in to the site using your personal account find the ldquoCompaniesrdquo menu and just follow the instructions from thereon LinkedIns wizard will guide you throughout the whole process
2 Make sure that you complete all the necessary information in the registration process Dont leave any space blank If you have a logo for your business then add it Dont forget to place the location of your business as well This is especially important if your business is a brick and mortar one Including your business location is very critical if your online presence is for marketing purposes only You have to let people know where they can find your physical store if they are interested in doing business with you
3 Take time to write a brief but very informative description of your business See to it that the description includes information about your business offerings whether these are products or services or both Most people dont have the time to read through long texts so make the description as brief and as straight to the point as possible
4 Place your business under the correct category LinkedIn members will be using the sites search functions to look for businesses on the site If you placed your business in the wrong category or industry your targeted customers or partners wont be able to find your business profile
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
The Tribal Woman Magazine
5 If you have a business or company blog get the feed of the blog and include it on your business LinkedIn profile Anyone who follows your profile will be updated on the latest posts on your blog If you dont have a business blog now is the time to start one Putting the feed on your LinkedIn profile will keep the page fresh and entice other LinkedIn members to keep visiting your business profile
6 LinkedIn will pull all the other accounts feeds and links on the site related to your business profile and connect them all together These include your job listings current employees and even former employees With that said its crucial that you monitor these things to make sure that everything that is being connected to your profile are legit
When it comes to setting up a LinkedIn profile for your business keep these simple tips in mind and you will have a winning profile in no time
In your October issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner we will be talking about how to use LinkedIn Answers for building your business credibility
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
part two of a two part
seriesBuild A Better Business Blog
I am often quoted as saying ldquoYour clients buys you before they buy what you are sellingrdquo Believe me itrsquos true Blogs are on of the ways you can start a conversation with your audience They are a powerful tool for connecting you with them on an ongoing basis so you can build and maintain a relationship
The problem for most business owners is that they do not have a customizable website and adding a blog would be more time effort and energy than they could ever afford to invest until now
In this training series ANYONE can learn the basics of blogging and Wordpress technology and translate that knowledge very quickly into a marketable revenue generating skill
You will go from absolutely ZERO knowledge about blogging to a confident and capable business blogger using the powerful Wordpress platform If you can dedicate a few short hours to you will be miles ahead of the competition and ready to separate yourself from the pack
The series gives you 10 very specific lessons that will help your business get up and running in the blogging world in less than a day
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Harness The PowerWhen it comes to building your presence online there are plenty of reasons why you should create a profile for your business on LinkedIn
First of all LinkedIn is a business-focused social networking site Majority of its members are online entrepreneurs business owners marketers and all sorts of business-oriented individuals This fact alone makes the social site a must-have for your own business If you are not building your presence on it then you are missing out on a lot of business opportunities
Whether you are promoting a new product or service looking to hire new employees or simply marketing your business as a whole LinkedIn provides you with a plethora of tools and resources that you may use to help you accomplish all these things
Creating a LinkedIn profile for your business is an effective business strategy Here are a few tips on how you should go about it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
1 Setting up a business profile on LinkedIn is free so there are no related costs that you have to be worried about Just log in to the site using your personal account find the ldquoCompaniesrdquo menu and just follow the instructions from thereon LinkedIns wizard will guide you throughout the whole process
2 Make sure that you complete all the necessary information in the registration process Dont leave any space blank If you have a logo for your business then add it Dont forget to place the location of your business as well This is especially important if your business is a brick and mortar one Including your business location is very critical if your online presence is for marketing purposes only You have to let people know where they can find your physical store if they are interested in doing business with you
3 Take time to write a brief but very informative description of your business See to it that the description includes information about your business offerings whether these are products or services or both Most people dont have the time to read through long texts so make the description as brief and as straight to the point as possible
4 Place your business under the correct category LinkedIn members will be using the sites search functions to look for businesses on the site If you placed your business in the wrong category or industry your targeted customers or partners wont be able to find your business profile
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
The Tribal Woman Magazine
5 If you have a business or company blog get the feed of the blog and include it on your business LinkedIn profile Anyone who follows your profile will be updated on the latest posts on your blog If you dont have a business blog now is the time to start one Putting the feed on your LinkedIn profile will keep the page fresh and entice other LinkedIn members to keep visiting your business profile
6 LinkedIn will pull all the other accounts feeds and links on the site related to your business profile and connect them all together These include your job listings current employees and even former employees With that said its crucial that you monitor these things to make sure that everything that is being connected to your profile are legit
When it comes to setting up a LinkedIn profile for your business keep these simple tips in mind and you will have a winning profile in no time
In your October issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner we will be talking about how to use LinkedIn Answers for building your business credibility
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
part two of a two part
seriesBuild A Better Business Blog
I am often quoted as saying ldquoYour clients buys you before they buy what you are sellingrdquo Believe me itrsquos true Blogs are on of the ways you can start a conversation with your audience They are a powerful tool for connecting you with them on an ongoing basis so you can build and maintain a relationship
The problem for most business owners is that they do not have a customizable website and adding a blog would be more time effort and energy than they could ever afford to invest until now
In this training series ANYONE can learn the basics of blogging and Wordpress technology and translate that knowledge very quickly into a marketable revenue generating skill
You will go from absolutely ZERO knowledge about blogging to a confident and capable business blogger using the powerful Wordpress platform If you can dedicate a few short hours to you will be miles ahead of the competition and ready to separate yourself from the pack
The series gives you 10 very specific lessons that will help your business get up and running in the blogging world in less than a day
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
1 Setting up a business profile on LinkedIn is free so there are no related costs that you have to be worried about Just log in to the site using your personal account find the ldquoCompaniesrdquo menu and just follow the instructions from thereon LinkedIns wizard will guide you throughout the whole process
2 Make sure that you complete all the necessary information in the registration process Dont leave any space blank If you have a logo for your business then add it Dont forget to place the location of your business as well This is especially important if your business is a brick and mortar one Including your business location is very critical if your online presence is for marketing purposes only You have to let people know where they can find your physical store if they are interested in doing business with you
3 Take time to write a brief but very informative description of your business See to it that the description includes information about your business offerings whether these are products or services or both Most people dont have the time to read through long texts so make the description as brief and as straight to the point as possible
4 Place your business under the correct category LinkedIn members will be using the sites search functions to look for businesses on the site If you placed your business in the wrong category or industry your targeted customers or partners wont be able to find your business profile
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
The Tribal Woman Magazine
5 If you have a business or company blog get the feed of the blog and include it on your business LinkedIn profile Anyone who follows your profile will be updated on the latest posts on your blog If you dont have a business blog now is the time to start one Putting the feed on your LinkedIn profile will keep the page fresh and entice other LinkedIn members to keep visiting your business profile
6 LinkedIn will pull all the other accounts feeds and links on the site related to your business profile and connect them all together These include your job listings current employees and even former employees With that said its crucial that you monitor these things to make sure that everything that is being connected to your profile are legit
When it comes to setting up a LinkedIn profile for your business keep these simple tips in mind and you will have a winning profile in no time
In your October issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner we will be talking about how to use LinkedIn Answers for building your business credibility
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
part two of a two part
seriesBuild A Better Business Blog
I am often quoted as saying ldquoYour clients buys you before they buy what you are sellingrdquo Believe me itrsquos true Blogs are on of the ways you can start a conversation with your audience They are a powerful tool for connecting you with them on an ongoing basis so you can build and maintain a relationship
The problem for most business owners is that they do not have a customizable website and adding a blog would be more time effort and energy than they could ever afford to invest until now
In this training series ANYONE can learn the basics of blogging and Wordpress technology and translate that knowledge very quickly into a marketable revenue generating skill
You will go from absolutely ZERO knowledge about blogging to a confident and capable business blogger using the powerful Wordpress platform If you can dedicate a few short hours to you will be miles ahead of the competition and ready to separate yourself from the pack
The series gives you 10 very specific lessons that will help your business get up and running in the blogging world in less than a day
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
The Tribal Woman Magazine
5 If you have a business or company blog get the feed of the blog and include it on your business LinkedIn profile Anyone who follows your profile will be updated on the latest posts on your blog If you dont have a business blog now is the time to start one Putting the feed on your LinkedIn profile will keep the page fresh and entice other LinkedIn members to keep visiting your business profile
6 LinkedIn will pull all the other accounts feeds and links on the site related to your business profile and connect them all together These include your job listings current employees and even former employees With that said its crucial that you monitor these things to make sure that everything that is being connected to your profile are legit
When it comes to setting up a LinkedIn profile for your business keep these simple tips in mind and you will have a winning profile in no time
In your October issue of The Marketerrsquos Corner we will be talking about how to use LinkedIn Answers for building your business credibility
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
part two of a two part
seriesBuild A Better Business Blog
I am often quoted as saying ldquoYour clients buys you before they buy what you are sellingrdquo Believe me itrsquos true Blogs are on of the ways you can start a conversation with your audience They are a powerful tool for connecting you with them on an ongoing basis so you can build and maintain a relationship
The problem for most business owners is that they do not have a customizable website and adding a blog would be more time effort and energy than they could ever afford to invest until now
In this training series ANYONE can learn the basics of blogging and Wordpress technology and translate that knowledge very quickly into a marketable revenue generating skill
You will go from absolutely ZERO knowledge about blogging to a confident and capable business blogger using the powerful Wordpress platform If you can dedicate a few short hours to you will be miles ahead of the competition and ready to separate yourself from the pack
The series gives you 10 very specific lessons that will help your business get up and running in the blogging world in less than a day
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
part two of a two part
seriesBuild A Better Business Blog
I am often quoted as saying ldquoYour clients buys you before they buy what you are sellingrdquo Believe me itrsquos true Blogs are on of the ways you can start a conversation with your audience They are a powerful tool for connecting you with them on an ongoing basis so you can build and maintain a relationship
The problem for most business owners is that they do not have a customizable website and adding a blog would be more time effort and energy than they could ever afford to invest until now
In this training series ANYONE can learn the basics of blogging and Wordpress technology and translate that knowledge very quickly into a marketable revenue generating skill
You will go from absolutely ZERO knowledge about blogging to a confident and capable business blogger using the powerful Wordpress platform If you can dedicate a few short hours to you will be miles ahead of the competition and ready to separate yourself from the pack
The series gives you 10 very specific lessons that will help your business get up and running in the blogging world in less than a day
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
But heres the thing even ldquoin less than a dayrdquo can be overwhelming when you have a lot on your plate To keep it simple for you I broke the lessons down into a two part series In our August 2012 Tribal Woman Magazine we covered
How to Sign Up For WordpressHow to Tweak Your Wordpress Settings for Best OptimizationHow to Create Your User ProfileHow to Choose a Theme
In this issue we will learn
How to Customize the Twenty-Twelve ThemeHow to Use Widgets to Your Best AdvantageHow to Create a Page -an OverviewHow to Create Your About PageHow to Create Your Contact PageHow to Create Content By Posting
Just think if you take one or two baby steps per week you will be blogging for business in no time
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
For More Marketing tips ways to grow your business and articles for your mind body and spirit Subscribe to today
The Tribal Woman Magazine
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Last Month I suggested you stick with the original theme - Twenty Ten I changed my mind I recently discovered the Twenty Twelve and I really like the way you can customize it
To switch to this theme 1 Type twenty twelve into the search bar2 Hit activate
Our next lesson will look at how you can customize your business blog to make it stand out using the Twenty Twelve theme
Update
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When customizing Twenty Twelve you still deal with the appearance pane in the WordPress menu You can access the customization options in the actual menu (pictured left) or you can reach them from the Themes page pictured above
Step 5 Customizing Twenty Twelve
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
The first customization we will make is the background of your blog I suggest matching the background color to your businesss color scheme You have an option to use an image here but I suggest just a solid color An image can display differently on many different monitors and resolutions It can be tricky to get right
You can change the background color of your site by adding the html hex code for the color or by clicking on select a color and choosing from a color wheel
When you have chosen a color it will show up at the top in the preview window When you are happy with the color you have chosen click on the blue ldquosave changesrdquo button and the color change will then be live on the site
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click on ldquosave changesrdquo you will see a yellow box pop up on the page near the top This box will prompt you to check out your website You can click the ldquovisit your siterdquo link to see how the new background color looks
If it looks good then you are done if not you can continue tweaking until you get a look that you like
When you visit your site you will see the image below For the purposes of this tutorial I chose a color scheme that matches my business Any color you choose will replace the gold in the picture that is the ldquobackgroundrdquo area
One other thing to notice is the Simple writing of ldquoThe Tribal Woman Blogrdquo This is the header area it is also customizable and that is what we will tackle next
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
the Marketing Corner
To customize your header you need to click on the header link under Appearance When you click on the header link you will see the page above The page consists of the preview at the top an option to upload an image the option to change the header text color or remove it completely
If you want to really customize your site then choose to upload your own image Beside the upload Image title there is a blurb that includes the image size (960x250) This is important because any image you create or purchase should be that size
For best results you will have to create an image that is exactly the above size You can use Paint Fireworks Photoshop or a free image editing program like GIMP You can also outsource this step - a site like fiverrcom will allow you to outsource a custom header for $5 Once you have your image it is easy to add to your website
Click the Browse button -gt Navigate to your image on your computer -gt Click upload -gt If your image is too big you will be taken to a crop screen where you can crop it to required dimensions -gt When you have it cropped to your liking hit crop and publish
When you are done you will get the yellow box prompting you to visit your site do so and check out your new header If it is fuzzy your image wasnrsquot the right size or you cropped it wrong If it looks good then you are now done customizing your theme
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
the Marketing Corner
If you are not using a custom header make sure you adjust your tag line
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
the Marketing Corner
These two simple steps really change the look In our next step we will learn to use widgets
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 6 Widgets
Also in the appearance menu is a submenu for widgets The widget area of your theme is where you can place widgets that add functionality to your blog
Widgets are designed to provide a simple way to arrange the various elements of your sidebar and footer content without having to change any code
Click on Widgets and you come to another page
On the right side is all of the areas you can use widgets on your site This list is theme specific On this theme you have seven areas to choose from
To activate a widget you simply drag it from the left hand side (see your choices on next page) into the area you want to add it You may have to open the area by clicking the little arrow beside the title
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
On the left side of the page you will see a list of your available widgets
Widgets allow you to add functionality to your site very easily These functions include things like Category Lists Recent Posts Recent Comments Calendar your twitter feed etc
There is also a text widget that has limitless uses It allows you to enter whatever text you want or any html code It is completely flexible
This theme has a lot of options so have some fun with it
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 7 Pages We have customized your business blog We
have tweaked the settings and we added some widgets to the sidebar and footers What is next Well now we begin to build the blog The first step is to create a couple of pages
Once you know how to do this you can replicate the process and create as many pages as you want I think you should keep it simple though
On this page you will see a list of your current pages and by hovering over the page title you will have options to delete edit and etc
Right now you only have the automatically added About page You will want to edit this page to reflect your business You can hover over it and click the edit link that appears or simply click on the page title
and only have a couple pages Any pages you create will be automatically added to the navigation of your blog You donrsquot want so many that it looks cluttered I suggest sticking to a max of about five The rest of your blogrsquos content will be added using ldquoPostsrdquo which we will touch on in a later lesson Pages are used for static content (ie content that generally stays the same about us contact us and etc)
In the left hand menu of your WordPress Dashboard you will see the Pages menu pane It has two options ldquoPagesrdquo which displays all of your current pages and ldquoAdd Newrdquo which allows you to add a new page Since WordPress automatically created an About page we will click on Pages which brings us to
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click on that you are brought to the nuts and bolts of the WordPress blogging platform - The Editor This editor is how you create all of your pages (and posts which we will talk about later) The page and post editors are very similar so letrsquos take a look at it now
1 Title Here is where you put the title of your page andor post If working on a page this title will show up in your nav bar It is currently set to About and that is good enough for this page You can change it if you want though
2 Permalink This is the link to that actual page You can keep it as is if you want You can also change it to include keywords if you are working on search engine optimization
3 Upload This area allows you to upload different types of media to your pagepost Things like pictures and music
4 VisualHTML These tabs lets you switch between The Visual Editor which is ldquoWhat You See Is What You Getrdquo or the HTML Editor which allows you to work with HTML coding if you feel comfortable
5 Toolbar This bar includes everything you need to edit your post It has a lot of buttons you might find in any simple word processor (ie bold italics spellcheck etc) Also of note the button right beside the ldquo6rdquo will open the toolbar fully to reveal even more basic editing tools
6 The Editor Right underneath the Permalink is the actual editor of WordPress This is how you build your actual page Here is where you either type in or copy and paste your information
7 Word Count A handy word count tool so you can see how much work you are actually doing p8 Copy a Post Allows you to use an existing post as a template
145
67
8
32
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath the editor you will also find your Like amp Sharing Panels These allow you to decide to include or exclude your sharing button and change the author of a particular page or post
Right besides the editor (to the right) is the Publish Pane
This pane is how you publish save and schedule your posts ldquoStatusrdquo controls if your pagepost is published or a draft If you accidentally publish something early you can use this setting to unpublish it
The ldquoVisibilityrdquo setting allows you to block pages or posts from the general public Only registered users will be able to see them or you can password protect a page and only people who know the password can access it
Underneath that is where you can schedule posts If you want to write 15 blog posts and have them come out one a day here is where you would accomplish that Click on edit and you can choose when to publish
At the bottom is your ldquoMove To Trashrdquo button to delete a current pagepost and the update buttons
The Page Attributes pane allows you to select theme dependent templates as well as order the pages in your navigation
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing CornerStep 8 Creating Your About Page
In the last step we looked at the page editor in general The goal was to get comfortable enough to be able to create your own pages If you are still in the editor for your ldquoAboutrdquo page then we can pick up where we left off
If you arenrsquot then visit your WordPress Dashboard look for the Pages subheading in your left hand menu and click on ldquoPagesrdquo You will see a list of your pages (currently just About) so go ahead and click on that and you will be brought back to the editor from last lesson Now we can begin
The first thing you can do is delete the information that WordPress automatically adds Simply click somewhere in the large window and delete all of that info
Next if you want you can add a picture A picture adds an eye catching visual element to your about page If you donrsquot have a picture right now you can skip this step Just make sure you come back to it when you have a picture you are happy with
If you want to brand yourself as an expert in your field a picture of yourself is great You can also use a picture of your business staff or some of your products
To add a picture simply click the ldquoAdd Picturerdquo icon in the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at top of editor For your convenience we circled the icon
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have clicked the icon a pop up window will open up
From here you can click ldquoSelect Filesrdquo and navigate to your picture on your computer and choose to upload it
The pop-up will change
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
It will now include a thumbnail of your image with a number of options underneath it
The ldquotitlerdquo area is simply the title of your picture If you are an advanced blogger you might want to use keywords in both this field and the alternate text field below it
You can also include a ldquocaptionrdquo with the picture WordPress will handle the styling
A rdquodescriptionrdquo field is also included but you can ignore that for now
The ldquoLink Urlrdquo field allows you to make the picture a clickable link to another website If you have a business website it might be a good idea to link to that otherwise leave the field blank
The final options allow you to align the picture and choose the size The images beside the alignment choices will show how the text will wrap around the image For the purposes of this tutorial I chose ldquononerdquo You can also choose from a couple of different sizes
Now you simply click ldquoInsert Into Postrdquo to add your picture to the page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you have inserted the picture you will see it in your editor Now you can enter your ldquoAbout Usrdquo info Just write a little about yourself and your business It doesnrsquot have to be a novel in fact keeping it simple is suggested I set the picture alignment to the left so the text automatically wrapped around the picture with that nice buffer
When you have your picture inserted and your blurb writtenstyled you can now publish it On the right of the editor page is the Publish Pane you were introduced to in previous lessons
Since this About page already existed the blue button says ldquoUpdaterdquo If it was a new page it would say ldquoPublishrdquo Whatever it says now click it and your page is officially live You will see the classic yellow box that urges you to view the new page appear Do so now and make sure it is up to your standards
If you ever want to make changes fix a mistake or add info you can access this About page from the Pages menu in the back office of WordPress
Congrats on publishing your first page
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
Step9 Creating Your Contact Page
the Marketing Corner
Last lesson looked at how to create your About page It was pretty straight forward Luckily any page you want to create essentially follows the same steps
There is one type of page that requires a slightly different tactic and it is the Contact page I suggest every business blog include
When you see the editor for your new page you can go ahead and add a title I chose simply ldquoContact Usrdquo you can choose whatever you want Remember page titles go into the site navigation so keep it relatively short
I then proceeded to add a blurb asking people to contact me if they have any thoughts or questions Be sure to add your contact info as well Once you have entered whatever info you want it is time to look back to the ldquoUploadInsertrdquo toolbar at the top of the editor The last icon (look for arrow) is the ldquoAdd Custom Formrdquo icon go ahead and click it
this page because it allows your web visitors to easily get in contact with you
First step is to click on ldquoAdd Newrdquo under the Pages heading in your WordPress dashboard menu
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Once you click the icon a window will pop up that has two tabs It opens up set to the ldquoForm Builderrdquo tab and this is where you can build your custom contact form
On the left hand side you see the form as it is now You just drag and drop the elements on the left to rearrange them in any order you like If you want to remove one click the minus side to the right of that particular element
Using the tools on the right you can change the form by adding new fields Under the bolded subtitle ldquoCan I Add More Fieldsrdquo is a ldquoClick Hererdquo link that you can click on to add them You can add simple text fields like name or phone number and etc You can also add text fields like the ldquoCommentrdquo area from above You can even add different checkboxes and drop down lists as well
There is also a ldquoFeedbacksrdquo link on the right This area of the WordPress back office will keep track of your contact form submissions
When you are done creating your form you can click the big blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button Before we do that though we should click on the second tab at the top of the pop up Click the ldquoEmail Notificationsrdquo tab
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you click the button you will be taken back to the editor You will notice some lines of code inserted into your page This is the code that controls the contact form
Double check to make sure your contact page is ready for publication Once you have done that look at the Publish Pane on the right Click on ldquoPublishrdquo and your contact page will go live The famous yellow box will pop up with a link to your new page Click it
In this section you can specify what email address you want the feedback to be sent to You can also change the subject of each email If you donrsquot enter any value into these forms then the feedback will be sent to the email address of the author who created the post or page that it is on The subject will be the title of that page or post
Switch back to the form builder and double check that you have all the fields you want When you are sure click on the blue ldquoAdd This Form To My Postrdquo button
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
When you view your new page this is what you should see Of course this is just a slice of the entire page but these elements should be present
You should see your blurb any contact info you added followed by your contact form
Double check to make sure the information is correct Take extra care on the phone number You donrsquot want to have thousands of people visiting your blog and then notice you had the wrong number posted
I would also strongly suggest testing your contact form This way you make sure it sends to your email and get an idea of how it will look
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Step 10 Adding Content aka Posts
Before we talk about posts lets see where we are after nine lessons This is a picture of our current blog and everything we have accomplished so far
1 In General Settings we added our own Blog Title In those same settings we added a tagline or description of our blog
2 We added a custom header to make our blog stand out from the pack
3 We added an About and Contact page WordPress automatically added them to our blogs navigation
4 We added widgets to our Primary Widget Areas
Your blog will list your posts in handy chronological order The power in blogging lies within the posts They will make up the majority of your content Blogs make it very easy to consistently add this content Regularly posting is the key to a successful blog
This is the last step you need to learn so lets take a closer look at creating posts for your blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
This window looks exactly like the pages window but it lists your posts instead It also has a couple of different columns like Categories and Tags for example
First off hover over the ldquoHello Worldrdquo title until you see an option pop up that lets you ldquoTrashrdquo the post This is just a placeholder and we will be replacing it with our own posts When you have it deleted click on the ldquoAdd Newrdquo link by the arrow above
To add posts we go back to the WordPress Dashboard menu This time look for the Posts Pane When you find it click on Posts This will bring up a chronological list of your blog posts
You will see a familiar sight - the editor We already broke this down in previous lessons so there isnrsquot much to add here
The differences between the two are more apparent on the right hand side of the screen
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Right underneath your Publish Pane (which is same as the pages one) you will see these fields
ldquoFormatrdquo is a setting that lets you choose from any post templates that may exist For the majority of your posts standard will be the best choice
Underneath is the ldquoCategoriesrdquo Pane and this is pretty important This allows you to categorize your posts That way if someone wants to search for a particular subject or type of post they can search the category
When you create your post make sure you check mark the proper category To add a new one simply click ldquoAdd New Categoryrdquo and type it in When you click it you will see a field for ldquoParent Categoryrdquo You can ignore this or you can use it to setup a hierarchy of your categories This allows you to have categories within categories For example you could have a House category and that category can be broken into smaller categories like ldquo3 Bedroomrdquo or ldquoWith Swimming Poolrdquo
Finally you will see the ldquoPost Tagsrdquo pane Tags are another way of organizing your posts It is just another way to ensure people can quickly find what they are looking for on your site Just enter a couple terms that relate to the post here Use terms that describe the post Click ldquoaddrdquo to add the term You can add as many as you want
Those are really the main differences between the page and post editor Almost everything you learned about the page editor previously is the same for posts
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Posts are the integral part of your blog If you want to build a readership and generate leadsbusiness you have to regularly post You follow the same basic process as creating a page Just follow these basic steps each time you want to create a blog post
1 Under Posts in WordPress menu click on ldquoadd newrdquo2 Make a title for your blog post Make it something people might search for
in Google if you can Your blog post can show up in Google searches3 Add your content and style with the Editorrsquos toolbars Use the Upload
Media area to add pictures and other media4 Either add a category or choose an existing one for your blog post5 Add or choose the relevant tags6 Using the publish pane either publish or schedule your blog posts
That is really it That is the power of a blog You can quickly add content to your website and it is naturally ordered and stored in a way that people can easily navigate
The KEY is to post as often as possible with information that people are looking for If you are starting a blog then you are taking on the task of
consistently producing quality content
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog
Cheryl T Campbellrsquos
the Marketing Corner
Now check out your blogrsquos homepage and you will notice your new posts are listed
Any time you add a new post it will automatically be added to the top of your blog in the content area
Good WorkCongratulations You Now Have a Blog